Top Banner
 MM COURSE: MASTER  Page | 1 BSNL USE R MANUAL : Master Version:1.0   01/09/2010   
704

1 MM-Master

Feb 22, 2018

Download

Documents

Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 1/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 1

BSNL

USER MANUAL : Mas t e r

Version:1.0

01/09/2010

Page 2: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 2/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 2

Table of Contents

1.  Material Master ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM .................................................................................................. 4

2. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP ................................................................................................. 44

3. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN ................................................................................................... 79

4. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV ..................................................................................................116

5. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL ..................................................................................................153

6. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN ...............................................................................................190

7. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS ................................................................................................227

8. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT ...................................................................................................264

9. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT ...............................................................................................301

10. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL ...........................................................................................338

11. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM ............................................................................................373

12. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC ............................................................................................410

13. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA ...........................................................................................447

14. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI ............................................................................................480

15. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS ............................................................................................512

16. MM-MM02-Material-Change ....................................................................................................549

17. MM-MM03-Material-Display ....................................................................................................557

18. MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes ......................................................................................563

19. MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material .........................................................................568

2.  Service Master ................................................................................................................................... 574 

1. MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display ....................................................................................574

2. MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display ..........................................................................................581

3. MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create ..........................................................................589

4. MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change ...........................................................................598

5. MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display ...........................................................................603

3.  Vendor Master ................................................................................................................................... 608 

Page 3: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 3/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 3

1. MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally) ............................................................................................608

2. MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally) ...........................................................................................625

3. MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally) ...........................................................................................634

4. MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally) .........................................................................................642

5. MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally) ..............................................................................................649

6. MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion ..............................................................................................654

7. MM-MKVZ-List Display ..................................................................................................................659

8. MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance ........................................................663

9. MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance ...............................................................665

4.  Price Info Record ............................................................................................................................... 669 

1. MM-ME11-Info Record-Create...................................................................................................... 669

2. MM-ME12-Info Record-Change ....................................................................................................679

3. MM-ME13-Info Record-Display .....................................................................................................690

5.  Source List ......................................................................................................................................... 695 

1. MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain ...................................................................................................695

2. MM-ME03-Source List-Display ......................................................................................................698

3. MM-ME0M-Source List for Material .............................................................................................701

Page 4: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 4/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 4

1. Material Master

1. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or

decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only atcertain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material

master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can beadded as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add

other information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will

need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are

to be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which

department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered atdifferent times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction.  

Page 5: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 5/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 5

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Required as using external numbers.

Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZADM” for Material

Type –  Admin Material

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 6: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 6/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 6

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will

  be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 7: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 7/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 7

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data

>Material>Create(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous

Goods Management> Environment> Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material

>Create (General) > Immediately(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >

Create (General)(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 8: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 8/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 8

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internal

no assignment. System willassign a new no for the

material

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

R Type T (Telecom Industry) or

select from pull down menu

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

R Type ZADM or select from the

Pull Down Menu

.

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless new

material is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Page 9: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 9/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 9

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types

wil l not contain certain views.

Page 10: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 10/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 10

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section HeaderMRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store

Page 11: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 11/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 11

 prof. forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Press Enter.

Page 12: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 12/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 12

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 13: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 13/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 13

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unit

of Measure

Units of measure in which

stocks of the material aremanaged

R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

MaterialGroup

Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

OldMaterial

 Number

Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n

O Enter if appropriate

X Plant

Matl Status

Indicates whether the material

may be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now this

field will not be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can beused afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 14: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 14/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 14

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 15: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 15/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 15

Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordance

with the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 16: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 16/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 16

Page 17: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 17/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 17

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 18: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 18/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 18

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Page 19: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 19/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 19

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 20: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 20/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 20

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 21: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 21/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 21

Page 22: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 22/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 22

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1

view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Rounding

value

Rounding value for

 purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 23: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 23/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 23

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 24: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 24/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 24

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtained

externally

O Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

Page 25: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 25/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 25

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table: 

Page 26: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 26/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 26

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Availability

Check

Identifies whether total

requirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02

(individual). NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen

Preference

depends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and

 procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the

material.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Press Enter.

Page 27: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 27/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 27

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 28: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 28/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 28

Page 29: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 29/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 29

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

Period

Indicator forshell life

The period indicator

specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant Specific Old materialnumber

O Enter Old Material Number

Press Enter.

Page 30: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 30/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 30

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 31: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 31/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 31

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handlinggroup

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with theStock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determination

strategy.

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 32: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 32/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 32

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 33: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 33/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 33

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspectiontype

The inspection type defineshow an inspection is

 performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM controlkey

Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 34: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 34/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 34

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 35: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 35/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 35

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class

Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material is

valuated with standard ormoving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults in

from thematerial type.

Mov. Avg.Price Moving average price ofthe material C Enter price

Press Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable 

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Page 36: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 36/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 36

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: AutomaticNot Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 37: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 37/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 37

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 38: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 38/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 38

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page 39: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 39/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 39

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material

Page 40: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 40/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 40

master record.

Press Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 41: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 41/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 41

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page 42: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 42/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 42

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Press Enter.

Page 43: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 43/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 43

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Press Enter.

Page 44: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 44/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 44

2. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP )

can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which

department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered atdifferent times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction

is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction.  

Page 45: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 45/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 45

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material N/A as there is an internal number assignment.

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCAP” for Material Type –  Capital Items

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA, PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 46: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 46/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 46

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and

a material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 47: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 47/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 47

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 48: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 48/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 48

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A System will assign a newnumber

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

R Type ZCAP or select from the

Pull Down Menu

.

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless new

material is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 49: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 49/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 49

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 50: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 50/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 50

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the material

master record.

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 51: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 51/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 51

Press enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 52: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 52/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 52

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can beused afterimplementation

GenericReq.

 Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 53: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 53/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 53

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 54: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 54/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 54

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. Std

Desc.

Description Of The

Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.

O

Part Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

Page 55: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 55/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 55

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsBase Unit

of Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1

screen.

 Not to be

changed orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required by

If definedhere, ordering

Page 56: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 56/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 56

Vendor unit will becommon for

all POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch

O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessingtime

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame formaterial type.However it

can be

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained for

Page 57: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 57/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 57

ProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for proprietary

items only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will

 be used incase of item is

 proprietary.

Press Enter.

Page 58: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 58/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 58

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 59: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 59/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 59

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 60: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 60/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 60

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP

/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) and

manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After the

generation ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later onautomatic

reorder point planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot Size

Data Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.

Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 61: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 61/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 61

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 62: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 62/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 62

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

Page 63: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 63/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 63

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 64: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 64/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 64

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.

Lead Time

Total lead time for finished

 product, including production and

 procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecast

model

Indicator that defines on

which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of the

material.

R Use pull down to change

default value

Page 65: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 65/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 65

Press Enter.

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 66: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 66/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 66

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for the

system to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator for

shell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit of

measurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant Specific Old materialnumber

O Enter Old Material Number

Press Enter.

Page 67: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 67/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 67

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 68: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 68/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 68

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 69: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 69/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 69

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 70: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 70/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 70

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable 

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Page 71: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 71/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 71

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: AutomaticNot Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 72: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 72/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 72

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this materialCopy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page 73: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 73/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 73

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page 74: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 74/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 74

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizational Levels Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 75: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 75/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 75

Press Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 76: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 76/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 76

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 77: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 77/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 77

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Press Enter .

Page 78: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 78/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 78

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Press Enter.

Page 79: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 79/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 79

3. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 80: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 80/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 80

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCN” for Material Type –  Consumable

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional information

will be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 81: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 81/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 81

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one

view exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a newmaterial.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 82: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 82/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 82

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level

screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs

on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been

extended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 83: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 83/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 83

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will

 provide number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) or

select from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type ZCN or select from thePull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 84: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 84/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 84

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 85: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 85/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 85

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Press Enter.

Page 86: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 86/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 86

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 87: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 87/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 87

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X Plant

Matl Status

Indicates whether the material

may be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now this

field will not be used.Howeverdepending on

requirement,this can be

used afterimplementation

GenericReq.

 Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 88: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 88/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 88

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 89: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 89/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 89

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordance

with the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

Page 90: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 90/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 90

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 91: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 91/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 91

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 92: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 92/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 92

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Press Enter.

Page 93: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 93/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 93

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 94: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 94/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 94

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 95: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 95/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 95

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning

(VB) will be used

After thegeneration of

sufficient datain the SAP,

later onautomaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may be

considered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS

for this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of

which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 96: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 96/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 96

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 97: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 97/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 97

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table: 

Page 98: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 98/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 98

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsAvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period are

to be used or individualRequirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen

Preferencedepends upon

company

Tot. Repl. Total lead time for finished O Enter time in days

Page 99: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 99/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 99

Lead Time product, including production and

 procurement along thelongest path

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Press Enter.

Page 100: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 100/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 100

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 101: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 101/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 101

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle

counting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of

inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for the

system to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator forshell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period

of time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page 102: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 102/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 102

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 103: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 103/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 103

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermine.

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 104: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 104/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 104

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table :

Page 105: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 105/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 105

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 106: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 106/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 106

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Page 107: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 107/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 107

ValuationClass

Defines which group ofG/L accounts material is

assigned

R Select from pull down menu tochange default value

Prom. stk val.

Class

Valuation Class for Project

Stock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.

Price

Moving average price of

the material

C Enter price

Press Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Press Enter.

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

Page 108: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 108/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 108

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 109: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 109/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 109

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 110: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 110/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 110

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page 111: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 111/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 111

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of theForecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Page 112: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 112/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 112

Press Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 113: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 113/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 113

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this materialCopy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page 114: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 114/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 114

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Press Enter.

Page 115: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 115/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 115

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizational Levels Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Press Enter.

Page 116: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 116/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 116

4. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 117: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 117/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 117

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCV” for Material Type –  Civil

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 118: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 118/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 118

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and

a material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 119: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 119/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 119

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 120: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 120/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 120

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type ZCV or select from thePull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 121: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 121/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 121

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al typeswil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 122: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 122/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 122

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizational Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material

master record.Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 123: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 123/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 123

Press enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 124: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 124/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 124

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 125: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 125/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 125

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 126: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 126/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 126

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordance

with the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

Page 127: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 127/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 127

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table: 

Page 128: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 128/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 128

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 129: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 129/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 129

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Press Enter.

Page 130: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 130/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 130

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 131: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 131/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 131

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 132: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 132/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 132

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP

/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) and

manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After the

generation ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later onautomatic

reorder point planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot Size

Data Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.

Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 133: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 133/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 133

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 134: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 134/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 134

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table: 

Page 135: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 135/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 135

Page 136: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 136/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 136

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period are

to be used or individualRequirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen

Preferencedepends upon

company

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along the

longest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross project

material

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecast

model

Indicator that defines on

which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to change

default value

Press Enter.

Page 137: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 137/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 137

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 138: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 138/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 138

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for the

system to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator for

shell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit of

measurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page 139: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 139/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 139

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 140: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 140/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 140

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handlinggroup

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No. profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with theStock Determination Rule

at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 141: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 141/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 141

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 142: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 142/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 142

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit of

measure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot

origin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 143: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 143/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 143

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

Page 144: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 144/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 144

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

ValuationClass

Defines which group ofG/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu tochange default value

Prom. stk val.Class

Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks of

the material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material is

valuated with standard ormoving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults in

from thematerial type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Press Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Press Enter.

Page 145: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 145/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 145

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 146: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 146/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 146

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 147: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 147/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 147

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page 148: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 148/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 148

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of theForecast

 prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 149: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 149/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 149

Press Enter.

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 150: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 150/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 150

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 151: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 151/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 151

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 152: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 152/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 152

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Press Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 153: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 153/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 153

5. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 154: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 154/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 154

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZEL” for Material Type –  Electrical

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 155: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 155/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 155

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one

view exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a newmaterial.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 156: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 156/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 156

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 157: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 157/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 157

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will

 provide number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) or

select from pull down menu

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

R Type ZEL or select from the

Pull Down Menu

.

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless new

material is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 158: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 158/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 158

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 159: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 159/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 159

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Press Enter.

Page 160: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 160/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 160

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 161: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 161/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 161

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 162: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 162/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 162

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 163: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 163/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 163

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordance

with the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 164: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 164/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 164

Page 165: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 165/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 165

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 166: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 166/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 166

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Press Enter.

Page 167: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 167/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 167

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 168: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 168/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 168

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 169: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 169/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 169

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit of

measure for this product

Defaults if

Basic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP

/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) and

manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After the

generation ofsufficient datain the SAP,

later onautomatic

reorder point planning (VM)may be

considered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.

Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 170: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 170/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 170

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 171: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 171/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 171

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

Page 172: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 172/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 172

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 173: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 173/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 173

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the

material.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Press Enter.

Page 174: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 174/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 174

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 175: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 175/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 175

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total Shelf

Life

 Number of days material

will keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator for

shell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit of

measurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page 176: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 176/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 176

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 177: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 177/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 177

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 178: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 178/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 178

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 179: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 179/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 179

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit of

measure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot

origin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page 180: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 180/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 180

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 181: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 181/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 181

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class

Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value for

the valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard ormoving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom thematerial type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Press Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Press Enter.

Page 182: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 182/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 182

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 183: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 183/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 183

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 184: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 184/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 184

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page 185: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 185/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 185

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of theForecast

 prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Press Enter.

Page 186: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 186/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 186

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 187: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 187/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 187

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 188: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 188/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 188

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 189: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 189/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 189

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Press Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents forthi s document on page 2).

Page 190: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 190/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 190

6. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 191: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 191/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 191

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material  Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZFGN” for Material Type –  Finished Goods

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 192: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 192/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 192

Tips and Tricks

  If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and

a material description.

  Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views

will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

  Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and

Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.

  The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains

typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of

default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master

record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a

profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 193: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 193/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 193

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 194: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 194/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 194

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will

 provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type Finished Goods or selectfrom the Pull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 195: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 195/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 195

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 196: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 196/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 196

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menuStorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material

master record.

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Press Enter.

Page 197: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 197/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 197

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 198: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 198/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 198

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unit

of Measure

Units of measure in which

stocks of the material aremanaged

R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

MaterialGroup

Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

OldMaterial

 Number

Legacy system material numbe previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

Howeverdepending onrequirement,this can beused after

implementation

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 199: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 199/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 199

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 200: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 200/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 200

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. Std

Desc.

Description Of The

Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.

O

Part Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 201: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 201/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 201

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unit

of Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1

screen.

 Not to be

changed orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required byVendor

If definedhere, orderingunit will be

common for

Page 202: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 202/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 202

all POs andhence

recommendedto be used at

PO level andnot in

 purchasing

view

PurchasingGroup

Group Responsible for purchasMaterial

R Enter or select from pull down li

MaterialGroup

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to bechanged orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch

O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials for

which shelflife needs to

 be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

Purchasing

Value Key

Identifies follow up intervals

and delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from

 pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GR

Processingtime

 Number of days required to

inspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days if

relevant

This will be

same formaterial type.However itcan bedifferent for

individual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier

 before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will be

maintained forProprietaryItems

Page 203: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 203/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 203

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will

 be used incase of item is

 proprietary.

Press Enter.

Page 204: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 204/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 204

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 205: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 205/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 205

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 206: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 206/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 206

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot SizeData  Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Press Enter.

Page 207: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 207/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 207

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 208: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 208/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 208

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd Delivery

Time

 Number of days required to

obtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

Page 209: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 209/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 209

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 210: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 210/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 210

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Generaldata

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 211: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 211/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 211

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 212: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 212/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 212

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

Period

Indicator forshell life

The period indicator

specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 213: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 213/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 213

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 214: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 214/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 214

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 215: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 215/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 215

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 216: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 216/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 216

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 217: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 217/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 217

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 218: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 218/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 218

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

R Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page 219: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 219/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 219

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Enter.

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 220: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 220/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 220

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page 221: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 221/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 221

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

Page 222: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 222/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 222

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of theForecast

 prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 223: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 223/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 223

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 224: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 224/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 224

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 225: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 225/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 225

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 226: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 226/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 226

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 227: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 227/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 227

7. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 228: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 228/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 228

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material  Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZFGS” for Material Type –  Serialized Finished Goods

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

A material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 229: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 229/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 229

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 230: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 230/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 230

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 231: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 231/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 231

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will

 provide number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) or

select from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type Serialized FinishedGoods or select from the PullDown Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 232: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 232/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 232

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 233: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 233/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 233

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 234: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 234/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 234

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 235: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 235/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 235

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 236: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 236/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 236

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 237: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 237/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 237

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 238: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 238/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 238

Page 239: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 239/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 239

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 240: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 240/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 240

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 241: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 241/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 241

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 242: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 242/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 242

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 243: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 243/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 243

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1

view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Rounding

value

Rounding value for

 purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 244: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 244/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 244

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 245: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 245/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 245

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

Page 246: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 246/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 246

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 247: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 247/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 247

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 248: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 248/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 248

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 249: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 249/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 249

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle

counting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of

inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time

intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator forshell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period

of time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 250: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 250/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 250

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 251: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 251/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 251

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 252: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 252/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 252

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 253: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 253/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 253

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 254: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 254/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 254

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 255: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 255/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 255

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

R Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page 256: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 256/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 256

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Enter.

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 257: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 257/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 257

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this materialMaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 258: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 258/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 258

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page 259: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 259/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 259

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 260: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 260/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 260

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 261: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 261/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 261

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 262: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 262/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 262

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 263: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 263/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 263

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screensselected.

 

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages)  

Page 264: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 264/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 264

8. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 265: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 265/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 265

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZIT” for Material Type –   ITMaterials

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:\

 Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view  Extending a material to another plant

Page 266: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 266/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 266

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 267: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 267/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 267

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 268: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 268/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 268

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type IT Material or select fromthe Pull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 269: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 269/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 269

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 270: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 270/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 270

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 271: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 271/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 271

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 272: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 272/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 272

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.Howeverdepending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementation

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 273: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 273/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 273

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 274: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 274/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 274

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

Page 275: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 275/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 275

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 276: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 276/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 276

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unit

of Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1

screen.

 Not to be

changed orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required byVendor

If definedhere, orderingunit will becommon for

all POs andhencerecommended

to be used atPO level and

not in purchasingview

PurchasingGroup

Group Responsible for purchasMaterial

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matlstatus

Plant specific material status.Determines availability ofMaterial for purchase or

 production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManagement

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch

O Check if appropriate It will bemaintainedonly for those

materials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

Purchasing

Value Key

Identifies follow up intervals

and delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from

 pull down listOther

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.

Page 277: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 277/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 277

However itcan be

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained for

ProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used tocapture

manufacturer's part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used incase of item is

 proprietary.

Enter.

Page 278: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 278/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 278

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 279: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 279/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 279

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 280: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 280/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 280

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning

(VB) will be used

After thegeneration of

sufficient datain the SAP,

later onautomaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may be

considered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS

for this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of

which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 281: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 281/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 281

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 282: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 282/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 282

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 283: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 283/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 283

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including

 production and

 procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 284: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 284/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 284

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model thesystem bases its calculation of

future requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 285: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 285/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 285

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 286: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 286/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 286

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

Period

Indicator forshell life

The period indicator

specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 287: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 287/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 287

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant  Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No. Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Page 288: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 288/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 288

 profile

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stock

determinationGroup

The stock determination

group combined with theStock Determination Rule

at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 289: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 289/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 289

n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 290: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 290/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 290

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 291: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 291/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 291

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 292: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 292/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 292

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not ApplicableEnter.

Page 293: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 293/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 293

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 294: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 294/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 294

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this materialMaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 295: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 295/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 295

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page 296: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 296/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 296

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 297: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 297/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 297

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 298: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 298/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 298

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 299: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 299/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 299

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 300: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 300/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 300

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pagee).

Page 301: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 301/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 301

9. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)

can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”

transaction.

Page 302: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 302/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 302

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZMKT” for Material Type –  Marketing Materials

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 303: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 303/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 303

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level

screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

Page 304: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 304/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 304

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data

>Material>Create(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous

Goods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material

>Create (General) > Immediately(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 305: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 305/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 305

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type Marketing Material orselect from the Pull DownMenu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 306: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 306/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 306

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 307: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 307/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 307

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 308: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 308/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 308

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 309: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 309/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 309

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 310: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 310/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 310

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 311: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 311/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 311

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 312: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 312/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 312

Page 313: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 313/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 313

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 314: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 314/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 314

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 315: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 315/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 315

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 316: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 316/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 316

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 317: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 317/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 317

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1

view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Rounding

value

Rounding value for

 purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 318: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 318/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 318

Page 319: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 319/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 319

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd Delivery

Time

 Number of days required to

obtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 320: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 320/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 320

Page 321: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 321/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 321

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Generaldata

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 322: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 322/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 322

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 323: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 323/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 323

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle

counting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of

inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time

intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator forshell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period

of time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 324: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 324/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 324

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant

 parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocks

in plant

 Negative stocks allowed in

 plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.

Handlinggroup

Logistics handling group

for workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No. profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Page 325: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 325/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 325

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 326: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 326/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 326

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 327: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 327/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 327

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 328: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 328/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 328

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 329: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 329/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 329

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Enter.

Page 330: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 330/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 330

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 331: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 331/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 331

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page 332: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 332/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 332

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

Page 333: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 333/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 333

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of theForecast

 prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Page 334: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 334/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 334

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 335: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 335/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 335

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 336: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 336/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 336

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 337: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 337/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 337

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 338: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 338/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 338

10. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)

can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”

transaction.

Page 339: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 339/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 339

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZNVL” for Material Type –   Non Valuated

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 340: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 340/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 340

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

 

Page 341: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 341/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 341

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data

>Material>Create(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous

Goods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material

>Create (General) > Immediately(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Billof Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >

Create (General)(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 342: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 342/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 342

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

R Type Non Valuated Material or

select from the Pull DownMenu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Page 343: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 343/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 343

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 344: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 344/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 344

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 345: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 345/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 345

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 346: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 346/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 346

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 347: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 347/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 347

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 348: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 348/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 348

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 349: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 349/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 349

Page 350: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 350/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 350

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 351: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 351/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 351

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 352: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 352/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 352

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 353: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 353/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 353

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 354: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 354/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 354

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP

/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) and

manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After the

generation ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later onautomatic

reorder point planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot Size

Data Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.

Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 355: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 355/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 355

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 356: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 356/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 356

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

Page 357: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 357/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 357

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 358: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 358/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 358

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including

 production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of the

material.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 359: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 359/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 359

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 360: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 360/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 360

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

Period

Indicator forshell life

The period indicator

specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 361: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 361/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 361

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 362: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 362/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 362

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table: 

Page 363: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 363/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 363

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit of

measure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspectiontype

The inspection type defineshow an inspection is

 performed. Several

O

Page 364: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 364/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 364

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot

origin.

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Enter.

Page 365: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 365/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 365

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 366: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 366/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 366

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 367: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 367/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 367

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 368: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 368/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 368

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation Storage LocationIdentification key O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 369: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 369/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 369

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 370: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 370/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 370

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 371: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 371/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 371

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 372: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 372/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 372

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 373: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 373/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 373

11. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)

can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”

transaction.

Page 374: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 374/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 374

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

MaterialRequired as using external numbers.

Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZRM” for MaterialType –  Raw Material

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 375: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 375/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 375

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level

screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

Page 376: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 376/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 376

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Billof Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 377: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 377/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 377

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internalno assignment. System will

assign a new no for thematerial

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type ZADM or select from thePull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 378: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 378/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 378

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 379: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 379/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 379

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material

master record.

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Page 380: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 380/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 380

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 381: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 381/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 381

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unit

of Measure

Units of measure in which

stocks of the material aremanaged

R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

MaterialGroup

Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

OldMaterial

 Number

Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

Howeverdepending on

requirement,this can beused after

implementation

GenericReq.

 Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 382: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 382/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 382

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 383: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 383/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 383

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 384: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 384/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 384

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged or

used here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will be

Page 385: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 385/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 385

common forall POs and

hencerecommended

to be used atPO level andnot in

 purchasingview

PurchasingGroup

Group Responsible for purchasMaterial

R Enter or select from pull down li

MaterialGroup

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to bechanged or

used here

Plant

sp.matlstatus

Plant specific material status.

Determines availability ofMaterial for purchase or

 production

O Blank indicates available As of now this

field will not be used.

Batch

Management

Identifies the material as

managed by batch

O Check if appropriate It will be

maintainedonly for those

materials forwhich shelflife needs to

 be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessingtime

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame formaterial type.However itcan be

different for

individualmaterial as

well.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietary

Page 386: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 386/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 386

Items

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used tocapture

manufacturer's part no. for proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 387: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 387/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 387

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 388: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 388/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 388

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 389: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 389/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 389

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning

(VB) will be used

After thegeneration of

sufficient datain the SAP,

later onautomaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may be

considered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS

for this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of

which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 390: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 390/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 390

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 391: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 391/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 391

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 392: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 392/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 392

Page 393: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 393/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 393

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral

data

Section header

Forecast

model

Indicator that defines on

which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to change

default value

Enter.

Page 394: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 394/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 394

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 395: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 395/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 395

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle

counting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of

inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time

intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator forshell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period

of time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant Specific Old materialnumber

O Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page 396: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 396/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 396

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log. Logistics handling group O Use pull down menu

Page 397: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 397/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 397

Handlinggroup

for workload calculation

Serial No. profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 398: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 398/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 398

Tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement Section header

Page 399: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 399/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 399

data

Inspectiontype

The inspection type defineshow an inspection is

 performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM controlkey

Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 400: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 400/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 400

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 401: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 401/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 401

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable 

Page 402: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 402/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 402

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: AutomaticNot Applicable

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 403: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 403/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 403

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material numberIndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 404: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 404/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 404

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 405: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 405/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 405

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 406: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 406/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 406

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 407: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 407/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 407

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 408: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 408/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 408

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 409: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 409/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 409

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section HeaderMRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 410: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 410/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 410

12. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, andMRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a materialwill need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 411: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 411/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 411

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZSAC” for Material Type –  Sub Assembly Materials

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 412: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 412/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 412

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical

MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 413: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 413/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 413

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data

>Material>Create(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous

Goods Management> Environment> Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material

>Create (General) > Immediately(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >

Create (General)(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 414: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 414/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 414

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type Sub Assembly or selectfrom the Pull Down Menu

.

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

system obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless new

material is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 415: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 415/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 415

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 416: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 416/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 416

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 417: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 417/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 417

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 418: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 418/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 418

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 419: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 419/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 419

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 420: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 420/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 420

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 421: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 421/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 421

Page 422: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 422/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 422

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 423: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 423/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 423

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 424: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 424/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 424

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 425: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 425/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 425

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 426: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 426/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 426

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP

/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) and

manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After the

generation ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later onautomatic

reorder point planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRP

Controller

Code for the person

responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desired

code from the list

Lot Size

Data Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximumstock level

Maximum stock levelallowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.

Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 427: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 427/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 427

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 428: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 428/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 428

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 429: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 429/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 429

Page 430: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 430/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 430

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 431: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 431/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 431

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 432: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 432/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 432

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle

counting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of

inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time

intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator forshell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period

of time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 433: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 433/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 433

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocks

in plant

 Negative stocks allowed in

 plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No. profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Page 434: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 434/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 434

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermination

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified inthe below table:

Page 435: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 435/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 435

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can be

assigned to an inspection lot

O

Page 436: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 436/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 436

origin.

QM controlkey

Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 437: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 437/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 437

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 438: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 438/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 438

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not ApplicableEnter.

Page 439: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 439/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 439

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 440: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 440/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 440

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 441: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 441/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 441

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page 442: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 442/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 442

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 443: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 443/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 443

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 444: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 444/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 444

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 445: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 445/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 445

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 446: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 446/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 446

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents forth is document on above pages).

Page 447: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 447/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 447

13. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, andMRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a materialwill need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 448: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 448/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 448

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZSOA” for Material Type –  Scrap of Asset

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views

desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

 Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view  Extending a material to another plant

Page 449: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 449/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 449

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 450: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 450/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 450

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 451: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 451/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 451

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

Material

Type

Group to which material is

assigned.

R Type ZSOA Scrap of Asset or

select from the Pull DownMenu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 452: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 452/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 452

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

Page 453: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 453/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 453

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 454: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 454/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 454

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 455: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 455/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 455

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unitof Measure

Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are

managed

R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Material

Group

Key allowing grouping of

same or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

Old

Material

 Number

Legacy system material numbe

 previous SAP material master

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different

departments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.However

depending onrequirement,this can be

used afterimplementatio

n

Generic

Req. Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 456: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 456/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 456

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 457: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 457/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 457

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Enter.

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter.

Not Applicable

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 458: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 458/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 458

Page 459: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 459/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 459

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1

view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Rounding

value

Rounding value for

 purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 460: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 460/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 460

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 461: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 461/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 461

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd Delivery

Time

 Number of days required to

obtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 462: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 462/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 462

Page 463: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 463/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 463

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 464: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 464/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 464

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 465: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 465/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 465

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material is

issued

O Enter Unit of Issue or select

from pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried

out for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.

Shelf Life

 Number of days material

needs to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total ShelfLife

 Number of days materialwill keep in total

O Enter number of days

Period

Indicator forshell life

The period indicator

specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant specific Old Material Number

O Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page 466: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 466/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 466

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.

Handlinggroup

Logistics handling group

for workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No. Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Page 467: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 467/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 467

 profile

Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stock

determinationGroup

The stock determination

group combined with theStock Determination Rule

at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 468: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 468/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 468

n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 469: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 469/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 469

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 470: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 470/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 470

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 471: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 471/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 471

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

R Press F4 to call the menu list

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „S‟ –  Standard Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

StandardPrice

Standard price of thematerial

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page 472: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 472/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 472

On tab “Plant stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

Enter.

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 473: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 473/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 473

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this materialMaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 474: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 474/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 474

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page 475: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 475/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 475

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 476: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 476/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 476

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 477: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 477/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 477

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 478: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 478/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 478

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 479: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 479/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 479

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull

down menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or select

from pull down menuProfiles Section Header

MRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 480: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 480/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 480

14. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)

can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”

transaction.

Page 481: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 481/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 481

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

MaterialRequired as using external numbers.

Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZSOI” for MaterialType –  Scrap of Inventory

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not

desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 482: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 482/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 482

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 483: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 483/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 483

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus 

(a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material

>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data

>Material>Create(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous

Goods Management> Environment> Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material

>Create (General) > Immediately(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >

Create (General)(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 484: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 484/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 484

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internalno assignment. System willassign a new no for thematerial

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type ZSOI or select from thePull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 485: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 485/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 485

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 486: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 486/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 486

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select

from pull down menu

Profiles Section HeaderMRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 487: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 487/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 487

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 488: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 488/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 488

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unit

of Measure

Units of measure in which

stocks of the material aremanaged

R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

MaterialGroup

Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

OldMaterial

 Number

Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

Howeverdepending on

requirement,this can beused after

implementation

GenericReq.

 Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 489: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 489/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 489

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 490: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 490/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 490

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. StdDesc.

Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate

industry standard.

OPart Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Enter.

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Not Applicable

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 491: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 491/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 491

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists

MRP

Procedure 

Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient data

in the SAP,later on

automatic

Page 492: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 492/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 492

reorder point planning (VM)

may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.

O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Roundingvalue

Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up

the procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 493: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 493/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 493

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

SchedulingPlnd Delivery

Time

 Number of days required to

obtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Page 494: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 494/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 494

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 495: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 495/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 495

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.

Lead Time

Total lead time for finished

 product, including production and procurement along the

longest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross project

material

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

data

Section header

Forecastmodel

Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the

system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the

material.

R Use pull down to changedefault value

Enter.

Page 496: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 496/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 496

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 497: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 497/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 497

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total Shelf

Life

 Number of days material

will keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator for

shell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit of

measurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant Specific Old materialnumber

O Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page 498: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 498/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 498

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 499: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 499/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 499

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter

Page 500: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 500/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 500

On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 501: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 501/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 501

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 502: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 502/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 502

Page 503: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 503/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 503

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or

separately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

Valuation

Class

Defines which group of

G/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu to

change default value

Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable 

Page 504: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 504/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 504

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: AutomaticNot Applicable

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 505: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 505/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 505

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

Industry

Sector

Specifies branch of industry

to which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System will

default in the value stored for

this materialMaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 506: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 506/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 506

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page 507: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 507/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 507

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material

master record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 508: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 508/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 508

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

Material Group to which material is O Leave blank. System will

Page 509: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 509/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 509

Type assigned. default in the value stored forthis material

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem

obtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 510: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 510/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 510

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 511: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 511/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 511

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section HeaderMRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 512: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 512/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 512

15. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS

Overview

  A material master is required for a material.

  A material needs to have additional department views created.

  A new material is to be used in a production process.

  A material needs to be extended to another plant. 

  Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master. 

  A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material. 

Business Process Description Overview 

Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at

certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be

added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.

The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.

For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.

A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.

The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.

Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.

Page 513: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 513/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 513

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

MaterialRequired as using external numbers.

Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZTCS” for MaterialType –  Telecom & Spares

Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required

Output - Results  Comments  New material created Material Created and available for other activities

 New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended

BPP Table of Contents

Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

  Basic Data

  Purchasing

  Purchase Order Text

  MRP

  Forecasting

  Plant data/storage

  Quality mgt.

   Accounting

  Costing

  Plant stock

  Storage location stock

  Extending a material to add a departmental view

  Extending a material to another plant

Page 514: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 514/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 514

Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a

material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be

copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material

type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values

(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an

MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system

and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-

passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new

material.

  Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to

be by-passed unless selected.

Page 515: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 515/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 515

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material

in other plants.

To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material

Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Material

master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)(d)  Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >

Material > Create>Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(f)  Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create

(g)  Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(h)  Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(i)  Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical

Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j)  Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill

of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)

(k)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

Via Transaction Code  MM01

Page 516: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 516/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 516

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internal

no assignment. System willassign a new no for thematerial

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

R Type ZTCS or select from thePull Down Menu

.

Copy FromMaterial:

Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.

O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an

existing material

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press Enter.

Page 517: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 517/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 517

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes 

Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 518: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 518/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 518

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the materialmaster record.

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Page 519: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 519/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 519

Enter.

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 520: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 520/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 520

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Description R Enter in material description

Base Unit

of Measure

Units of measure in which

stocks of the material aremanaged

R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

MaterialGroup

Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials

R Enter Material Group

OldMaterial

 Number

Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n

O Enter if appropriate

X PlantMatl Status

Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments

C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

Howeverdepending onrequirement,

this can beused after

implementation

GenericReq.

 Number

Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate

Page 521: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 521/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 521

On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,

enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page 522: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 522/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 522

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Ind. Std

Desc.

Description Of The

Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.

O

Part Number to be maintained

Document   Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.

O Drawing Number to bemaintained.

On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 523: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 523/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 523

Page 524: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 524/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 524

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Base Unitof Measure

Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.

 Not to bechanged orused here

Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from

 base UOM and required byVendor

If defined

here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence

recommendedto be used atPO level and

not in purchasing

view

Purchasing

Group

Group Responsible for purchas

Material

R Enter or select from pull down li

Material

Group

Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc  Not to be

changed orused here

Plantsp.matl

status

Plant specific material status.Determines availability of

Material for purchase or production

O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not

 be used.

BatchManageme

nt

Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained

only for thosematerials forwhich shelf

life needs to be maintained.

Purchasin

g Values

Section Heading

PurchasingValue Key

Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances

O Select appropriate key from pull down list

Other

Data

Section Heading

GRProcessing

time

 Number of days required toinspect and place in storage

O Enter number of days ifrelevant

This will besame for

material type.However it

can be

Page 525: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 525/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 525

different forindividual

material aswell.

Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues

O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems

Mfr. Partnumber

Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to

capturemanufacturer's

 part no. for

 proprietaryitems only

Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in

case of item is proprietary.

Enter.

Page 526: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 526/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 526

On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages

and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page 527: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 527/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 527

On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 528: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 528/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 528

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product

Defaults ifBasic Data 1

view exists

MRP

Procedure Section Heading

MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed

R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used

After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on

automaticreorder point

 planning (VM)may beconsidered.

Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value

MRPController

Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material

O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list

Lot Size

Data 

Section Heading

Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.

Maximum

stock level

Maximum stock level

allowed

O Enter value

Rounding

value

Rounding value for

 purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.

O Enter value

Enter.

Page 529: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 529/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 529

On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 530: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 530/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 530

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Scheduling

Plnd DeliveryTime

 Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally

O Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below

table:

Page 531: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 531/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 531

Page 532: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 532/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 532

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AvailabilityCheck

Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual

Requirements

R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).

 NOTE: This is the only

required field on this screen

Preferencedepends uponcompany

Tot. Repl.Lead Time

Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path

O Enter time in days

Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral

data

Section header

Forecast

model

Indicator that defines on

which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.

R Use pull down to change

default value

Enter.

Page 533: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 533/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 533

On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 534: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 534/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 534

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data Section Heading 

Base Unit ofMeasure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list

Defaults fromBasic Data

Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued

O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list

Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate

Ph. Inv.Indicator for

cyclecounting

Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the

cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator

also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material

O Select from pull down menu

Shelf Life

Data 

Section Heading 

Min. Rem.Shelf Life

 Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept

O Enter number of days.

Total Shelf

Life

 Number of days material

will keep in total

O Enter number of days

PeriodIndicator for

shell life

The period indicatorspecifies the unit of

measurement for a periodof time

O Enter number of days

Old Material Number

Plant Specific Old materialnumber

O Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page 535: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 535/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 535

On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 536: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 536/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 536

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General plant parameters

Section header

 Neg. stocksin plant

 Negative stocks allowed in plant

O Check box as appropriate

Log.Handling

group

Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation

O Use pull down menu

Serial No.

 profile

Serial number profile O Use pull down menu

Dist. Prof Distribution profile of

material in plant

O Use pull down menu

Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu

Stockdetermin.

Group

The stock determinationgroup combined with the

Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key

for the stock determinationstrategy.

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page 537: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 537/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 537

n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in

the below table:

Page 538: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 538/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 538

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General data Section header

Base Unit ofmeasure

Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Procurement

data

Section header

Inspection

type

The inspection type defines

how an inspection is performed. Several

inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.

O

QM control

key

Control Key for Quality

Management in Procurement

O Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the

below table:

Page 539: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 539/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 539

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

General

Data 

Section Heading 

Base Unit of

Measure

Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull

down list

Defaults from

Basic Data.

ValuationCategory

Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately

O

Current

Valuation 

Section Heading 

ValuationClass

Defines which group ofG/L accounts material isassigned

R Select from pull down menu tochange default value

Prom. stk val.

Class

Valuation Class for Project

Stock. Default value forthe valuation class for

valuated project stocks ofthe material.

R Use pull down menu

Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or

moving average price

R „V‟ –  Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the

material type.

Page 540: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 540/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 540

Mov. Avg.Price

Moving average price ofthe material

C Enter price

Enter.

On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no

field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable 

On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this

material in this plant: Automatic

Not Applicable

On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks

of this material in this storage location: Automatic

Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination. 

Page 541: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 541/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 541

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material

Master>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 542: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 542/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 542

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page 543: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 543/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 543

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 544: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 544/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 544

 Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pull

down menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast

 prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store

forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

this document on page 2).

Page 545: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 545/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 545

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)

(c)  Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)

Via Transaction Code  MM01

On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 546: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 546/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 546

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Key identifying material R Enter material number

IndustrySector

Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material

MaterialType

Group to which material isassigned.

O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for

this material

Copy From

Material:

Similar material from which th

systemobtains selected values

O Leave blank.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the

basic data views.

Page 547: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 547/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 547

Enter.

On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

 Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page 548: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 548/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 548

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu

StorageLocation

Storage LocationIdentification key

O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Profiles Section HeaderMRP

Profile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store

MRP parameters that areindependent of the

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Enter. 

Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for

th is document on above pages).

Page 549: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 549/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 549

16. MM-MM02-Material-Change

Overview

  A request to immediately change one or more fields in the material master views

Business Process Description Overview 

Fields within the material master can be added and maintained after the initial creation process. Somefields cannot be changed after creation (i.e. material description) and some should not be changed without

 proper precautions.

To change a material master record, the data for the view the user wants to change must already bemaintained.

Note that to add a view or extend a material to a new plant, the “Create Material” transaction isused rather than the “Change Material” transaction.

Input-Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Material Material Number

Output - Results  Comments 

Material Master View (s) changed Chosen view in Material Master will change

Tips and Tricks

When selecting view for change, it is possible to avoid time and effort, by clicking on right mouse

button and use “Select All” rather than indicating each view button

When changing material master views you can proceed in a linear fashion between views by

pressing “Enter” key or pressing Check mark key. By pressing the view tabs you can control

progression through views as per your preference.

Page 550: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 550/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 550

The Views that you use will drive the “Organizational level” pop-up window and its fields. To set

user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:

Views:

  Menus: Defaults >> Views

  Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material. Select ‘View

selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

  Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels

  Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material. Select ‘Org.levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.

Page 551: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 551/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 551

Procedural Steps 

Access ‘Change Material’ by: 

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Change > Immediately

(b)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools

> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Change>Immediately(c)  Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Master

Data>Products>Material >Trading Goods > Change(d)  Logistics>Logistics Execution >Master

Data>Material>Material > Change> Immediately

(e)  Logistics>Customer Service> Technical Objects>Material>Change

(f)  Logistics>Quality Management Test EquipmentManagement> Test Equipment > Material >Change

(g)  Logistics>Project Systems> Basic data> Materialmaster>Material>Change

Via Transaction Code  MM02

On screen ‘Change Material: Initial screen’: enter information in table below: 

Page 552: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 552/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 552

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material number R Enter the material number ifknown or search via matchcode

Change Number

Unique number used toidentify a change master

record

O Enter number if required

Enter.

Page 553: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 553/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 553

On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the

screens desired.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types

wil l not contain certain views.

Press Enter.On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels ”: enter information in table below: 

Page 554: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 554/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 554

Note: The information required wil l depend upon whi ch views were selected.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Organizati

onal Levels

Section Header

Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will

 be active or select from pulldown menu

Storage

Location

Storage Location

Identification key

O Enter Storage Location where

material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu

Sales org. Sales Organization O Required if sales view wasselected

Distrchannel

Distribution Channel O Required if sales view wasselected

Whsenumber

Warehouse number N/A Required if warehousemanagement view selected

Storagetype

Storage type N/A Required if warehousemanagement view selected

Profiles Section Header

MRPProfile

MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are

independent of the

Page 555: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 555/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 555

Forecast prof.

Forecast profile N/A Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters

independently of a materialmaster record.

Enter.

On subsequent screens, make the necessary changes. For example Change

the Purchasing Group in Purchasing Tab

Page 556: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 556/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 556

Save the revised material master using the “Save” button or use “Ctrl S”. 

Page 557: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 557/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 557

17. MM-MM03-Material-Display

Overview

Need to view current material master data for one material.

Business Process Procedure Overview 

A material master record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailed information without

having the authority to change it.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Material Material number

View At least one view (for example, Basic Data, Sales, Accounting,MRP, etc.) must be selected

Output - Results  Comments Information about the material Material displayed

Tips and Tricks

  If the same values are used frequently, it will be faster to access the material master data by

setting up defaults. Default values can be set up for Industry Sector, Views and Organizational

levels. These defaults are set from the MM03 initial screen, from the menu selection

“Defaults”.

  If all views should be displayed, it is faster to clicking on right mouse button and use “Select All”(or press the “Select All” icon) rather than clicking on each view button. 

  To display a material for a specific date, please use Display Material Master by Key Date,

transaction MM19. This transaction will show the fields associated with the material on the

entered, key date.

Page 558: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 558/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 558

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

a)  Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Material

Master>Material>Display > Display current b)  Logistics>Materials Management>Inventory

Management>Environment> information>Materialc)  Logistics > Production > Master Data > Material Master >

Material > Display > Display current

d)  Logistics > Plant Maintenance > Technical Objects >Material > Display

e)  Logistics > Customer Service > Technical Objects > Material> Display

f)  Logistics > Quality Management > Quality Planning >Logistics Master Data > Material > Display

g)  Logistics > Project System > Basic Data > Master Data >

Material > Display

Via Transaction Code  MM03

On screen “Display Material (Initial Screen)”, enter information in the fields

as specified in the table below:

Page 559: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 559/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 559

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material number R Material known or viamatchcode

On the pop-up screen “Select View(s)”: enter information in table below: 

Page 560: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 560/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 560

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

SelectView

View or views that containthe information to bedisplayed

R Select the appropriate view(s)

On the pop-up screen “Organizational Levels”, enter the appropriate

information in table below (the system will determine which organizational

levels are appropriate for the views that have been selected):

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Plant Plant number where materialis located

C Plant number known or viamatchcode search

Storage

Location

Location where material is

stored

C Enter storage location if known If you are

looking forstorage locationspecificinformation,

then you will be required to

Page 561: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 561/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 561

enter thestorage

location.

Valuation

Type

How material is valued C Leave blank - will default from

Materials Master

This field is

only used whena material issplit valued.

Sales org. The organizational unit that isresponsible for selling thematerial

C Enter the appropriate salesorg., if you want to see theSales information

Distr.channel

The way in which thematerial reaches the customer

C Enter the appropriateDistribution channel if you

want to see the Salesinformation.

Enter Press enter or click on thecheck mark

R Will display view you havechosen or Basic data if you

chose more than one view. It isthen possible to tab to thespecific view of current

interest.

Note: On the above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

On the screen “Display Material <material number you entered> (Material

type of the material you entered); you may do the following:

  Select the tab associated with the view of information you wish to check. Scroll back and forward arrows

appear in the upper right-hand corner of the table view. Alternately, a list of views, which exist for thematerial, can be seen by pressing on right most arrow. You can navigate to appropriate view via selectingfrom this list.

  If you wish to see the defined alternate units of measure, Material descriptions in other languages, Basic

data text, Inspection Text, or Internal Comments that exist for the material,  press the “Additional Data”

 button. Press the button “Main data” to return to the views.

Page 562: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 562/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 562

  If you wish to review the changes that have been made to this material, select from the menu,

Environment > Display Changes. Double-click on the appropriate date, and you will know who changed

which fields on what date and at what time, for this material.

  If you wish to check a different material, you can either press the button “Other Material” , or green

arrow back to the initial screen.

Page 563: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 563/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 563

18. MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes

Overview

Requirement to view changes made to a material master record

Business Process Procedure Overview

All changes made to fields in the material master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displaysthe old field entry, the new field entry. It also shows who made the change and the date the change wasmade.

Input –  Required Fields Field Value/Comments

Material Material number

Output - Results Comments

Material Master changes display All changes made to the original Material master record

Page 564: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 564/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 564

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Material Master>Material>Display Changes

Via Transaction Code  MM04

On screen “Display Changes: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields

as specified in the table below:

Page 565: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 565/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 565

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Alphanumeric key uniquelyidentifying the material. 

R Material number known or viamatchcode search

Change no. Number used to uniquelyidentify a change masterrecord. 

O Change number known or viamatchcode search

Plant An organizational unit whereeither materials are producedand/or stored or goods orservices are provided

O Plant known or via drop downmenu

ValuationType

Uniquely identifies separatelyvaluated stocks of a material.

O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu

Sales Orgn. An organizational unitresponsible for the sale of

certain products or services.The responsibility of a salesorganization may includelegal liability for products andcustomer claims.

O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu

Distribution Channel

The way in which products orservices reach the customer.

Typical examples ofdistribution channels are

wholesale, retail, or directsales.

O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu

Warehouse

no.

 Number that identifies a

complex, physical warehousestructure within theWarehouse Managementsystem

O Type value if known else select

via drop down menu

StorageType

The storage type is asubdivision of a complex,

 physical warehouse.

O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu

Changed by Name of person who changed

object

O Type the user id to search changes

made by that user.

From

changeddate

Date restriction for  change

documents. The system onlydisplays changes which were

made as from this date.

O Type date else select via drop

down menu

Page 566: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 566/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 566

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the button.

On screen “Display Changes: Material overview”, view the field changes

made to the Material master record. Either double clicks or select and see

details via clicking “Choose” button.

Page 567: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 567/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 567

Page 568: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 568/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 568

19. MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material

Overview

Need to extend existing material master records to include additional departmental views.

Business Process Procedure Overview 

Material master records are an accumulation of data from numerous departments. New views of a

material are added as necessary and it is necessary to determine which views need to be added to amaterial. This procedure lists all of the views that have not been created for a material.

This procedure can also be used to determine to which plants a material has been extended.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Selection limit criteria Necessary to prevent excessively large output lists

Output - Results  Comments Create missing views of the materialmaster record

Views created as per the requirement

Tips and Tricks

To avoid excessive run times and huge output lists, it is imperative to restrict the search limits on theinitial screen. If no entries are made the system will list all materials in all plants.

By entering a material number, it is possible to determine the plants to which a material has beenextended. Additional plants need to be added using the MM01 transaction.

Page 569: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 569/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 569

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics -> Materials management -> Material master -> Other -> Extend matl view(s)

Via Transaction Code  MM50

On screen “Extend Material View(s): Initial Screen”, enter information in the

fields as specified in the table below to limit the material search:

Page 570: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 570/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 570

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Selection

Criteria

Section header

Maintenanc

e status

Identifier for the user

department responsible formaintaining a view of thematerial master record

O Use pull down menu to select.

Created on Date that the material masterrecord was created

O Use pull down menu to select.

Plant Organizational unitresponsible for the producingmaterials or providing goodsor services

O Use pull down menu to select.

Salesorganizatio

n

Organizational unitresponsible for the sales of

specific products or services

O Use pull down menu to select.

Distributio

n channel

Identifier for the method in

which a product reachescustomers.

O Use pull down menu to select.

Warehousenumber

 Number of the warehouse O Use pull down menu to select.

Material Number of the material O Use pull down menu to select.

Materialtype

Code that assigns a materialto a group of materials

O Use pull down menu to select.

Industrysector

Identifier for the industry thatthe material is assigned

O Use pull down menu to select.

Selection

logic

Section header

ANDoperation

Flag that indicates if thesystem should select views

that satisfy all of the selection parameters

R Select AND or OR

ORoperation

Flag that indicates if thesystem should select views

that satisfy one of theselection parameters

O

Execute the selection process by clicking on the Execute button.

Page 571: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 571/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 571

On screen “Extend Material View(s): Overview”, select from the list of views

to be processed for each material by selecting the boxes in the left column.

Select from the following buttons to process the material master recordviews:

Maintain materials [Shift+F1]: Allows the user to maintain the selected views

Page 572: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 572/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 572

Delete status [Shift+F2]: Allows the user to delete the selected open status(es)

Select all [Shift+F8]: Selects all of the material views listed

Select all in block [Shift+F7]: Selects the current block of material views

Deselect all [Shift+F5}: Deselects all selected material views

Deselect block [Shift+F6]: Deselects the current block of selected material views

Reference/organization [F9]: Allows the user to create material views with

reference to existing material master records

Once the required material views have been selected, click on the Maintain

materials button to go to the corresponding view(s) in the material

master(s).

Page 573: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 573/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 573

Enter the information necessary to complete the view and save each

material after processing.

Repeat as necessary for additional materials.

Page 574: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 574/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 574

2. Service Master

1. MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display

Overview

A service master record provides a unique description of services that are procured by BSNL.

Business Process Description Overview This document describes the procedure for creating service master records via list processing. This

process enables the user to quickly create a large number of service master records with their most

important data in the system, referencing any already existing master records if desired. A service is

identified by the number of this master record. The service master record serves as a source of default

data provided by the system during the creation of service specifications.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Service CategoryService short text

Base Unit of Measure

Key used to differentiate services by usageDescription which identifies service

Services have base units of measure of their own: service unit and blanket

Output - Results  Comments Service Master Record Number Internal number range

Page 575: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 575/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 575

Tips and Tricks

  To create a new service master record, click on the create icon (blank pc. of paper).

  To edit an existing service master record, click on the change icon (pencil with eye glasses)

  To copy an existing master record, click on the copy as icon (two yellow pcs. of paper)

  To show/ hide service list overview, click icon

  To display other service codes (already created) select, “other services” button and enter

the service code you want to display:

Page 576: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 576/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 576

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  a)  Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing>

Material/service> Service> Service Master

b)  Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing>

Outline Agreement> Reporting> Purchasing Information

System> Environment> Master data> Service

c)  Logistics> Customer Service>Service

Agreements>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>ServiceMaster> Service> Service Master

d)  Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>Environment> Service Master> Service> Service Master

e)  Logistics> Plant Maintenance>Planned

Maintenance>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>Service

Master>Service> Service Master

f)  Logistics>Materials Management>ServiceMaster>Service>Service Master

Via Transaction Code  AC03

On screen “Display Service #############”, click the New Service button or

use the menu path EDIT >NEW to access the Create Service Master Record

Screen:

Page 577: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 577/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 577

Page 578: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 578/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 578

On screen “Create Service Master Record”, enter the information in the

fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

 ActivityNumber

Key which uniquely defines a

service

R External numbering will be used.

ServiceShort Text

40 char. Enter description ofservice

R Enter a short description of service

ServiceCategory

Key identifying service by

usage

R Enter service category

Short tx.Change

allowed

Check indicates that changesto text are allowed

O

Base Unitof Measure

Service Unit or Blanket R

Deletion

Flag

Indicator that allows deletion o

master record

O

Page 579: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 579/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 579

Formula Formula used for quantities ifdefined

O

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Click on “Basic Data” button to enter basic data information in the fields as

specified in the table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

MaterialGroup

Key to group several serviceswith the same attributes

O If all new records the user arecreating have the same material

group, enter value here.

Formula Formula used for quantities if

Defined

O

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional  

Press button “Time mgmt.” Enter the information in the fields as listed in the

table below.

Page 580: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 580/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 580

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Hier.ServiceNo.

A code identifying a group oflower level services

O Enter the code NotApplicable

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition

Press button “Internal Work”. Enter the information in the fields as listed in

the table below.

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Translation

Factor for translating servicerates

O Enter the conversion rate NotApplicable

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition

Save the master record by clicking on the yellow floppy disk icon, or crtl+S

1.2.1.  Message will be displayed confirming that the data records have been created

Exit Create Service Master processing. Click on yellow up-facing arrow icon,

or Shift+F3

Page 581: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 581/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 581

2.0.  Use the same transaction code to change or display the service master record.

2. MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display

Overview

Requirement for information and the status of service master records

Business Process Description Overview 

This document describes the procedure for displaying service master records via list processing

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Service Number Can be found using “possible entries” facility to choose relevant

master recordService Category Can be found using “possible entries” facility to choose relevant

master record

Output - Results  Comments List Display of Service MasterRecords

Page 582: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 582/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 582

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Service

Master>Service>Service List

b)  Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Maintenance Processing>

Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List

c)  Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Planned Maintenance>

Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>

Service> Service List

d)  Logistics> Customer Service> Service Agreements>

Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>

Service> Service List

e)  Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>

Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List

f)  Information Systems> General Report Selection> MaterialsManagement> Service Master> List Display: Service Master

Via Transaction Code  AC06

Page 583: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 583/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 583

On screen “List Display: Service Master: Selection of Services”: enter the user

desired selection criteria by choosing fields below:

Field Name Description R/O/

C

User Action and Values Comments

 ActivityNumber

Key that uniquely defines a

service

O Activity number known or via

matchcode selection to narrowsearch

Leaving

 blank willreturn all

recordswith

criteria

ServiceCategory

Key used to differentiateservices by usage

O Service category known or viamatchcode selection to narrowsearch

Service Description of service O Enter description to narrow records

Page 584: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 584/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 584

short text

MaterialGroup

Key to group several serviceswith the same attributes

O Material group known or via matchcoselection to narrow search

Division Determines sales area and busi

areas

O Division known or via matchcode sele

tonarrow search

Hier.Service no.

Key that identifies a higher-levservice

O Enter higher-level service to narrow se

ServiceType

Service Type O Enter service type to narrow search

Edition Version of service type O Enter Edition to narrow records

SSC Item External number assigned to thi

service from standard service c

O Enter SSC item to narrow search

Wage Type Key which specifies wage type O Enter wage type or via matchcode sele

to narrow search

Authorization Group

Group which authorizes users tcertain access

O Enter authorization group to narrow se

Created On Date created O Select date

Created By User O Select user

ChangedOn

Date changed O Select date

ChangedBy

User O Select user

Once selections are made, choose the

execute button (PROGRAM>EXECUto retrieve list of services which met

service selection criteria

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

On screen “List Display: Service Master: List of Services”: a list of services

which

met selection criteria from step 1.2 are shown:

Page 585: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 585/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 585

Page 586: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 586/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 586

Double click on service numbers the user want to individually display

Page 587: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 587/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 587

Click “Details” 

Selected Service is displayed

Page 588: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 588/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 588

Page 589: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 589/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 589

3. MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create

Overview

The need for service specifications that can be used in purchasing documents for planned procurements activities that include services.

Business Process Description Overview

This document describes the procedure for creating a model service specification. Model service

specifications (model specs) are specifications that can be used time and time again. You can use thespecifications for a certain group of services as a template if you procure these services repeatedly in the

future

Input Required Fields Field Value/Comments

Model Service Specification

 Name/Number

Enter a Model Service Specification name or number

Output - Results Comments

Completed Model Service

Specification

Can be used as template for repeated use

Page 590: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 590/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 590

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model

Service Specification>Create

Via Transaction Code  ML10

On screen “Create Model Services Specifications”, enter the information in

the fields as specified in the table below:

Page 591: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 591/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 591

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

ModelService

Specs.

 Number of a set of modelservice specifications

R Enter a key (name or number forexample) for the new service

model.

ServiceCategory

Key used todifferentiate betweenservices according totheir usage. Theservice category

defines certainattributes of the serviceand has a control

function.

O Enter the appropriate servicecategory for the new model.

Matchcode(F4) searchhelpavailable.

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter button.

On screen “Create Model Services Specifications”, enter the information in

the fields as specified in the table below:

Page 592: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 592/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 592

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

Blockingindicator

Indicator: blocks the use ofthe specification.

O Select if desired. Default is off.

Configuration/Serviceselection

Indicator: configurationoccurs at the time of serviceselection.

O Select if desired. Default is off.

Description Enter description of modelservice spec

R Enter description.

Page 593: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 593/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 593

Search term Search key O Enter search term

Currency Currency Key O Enter currency

MaterialGroup

Key which groups similarservices

O Please refer the attached annexure

Defaultdata forPurchasingRequisition

  Purchasing Org

  Fixed vendor

  Contract

O Enter default data

Check Data   Authorization Group

  Purchasing Status

  Valid from

O Enter check data

Administrative data

  Created On

  Created By

  Changed On  Changed By

C Display only, created by the systemat the time of creation and

subsequent changes to the spec.

The “I” iconwill call up

the detailedinformation

 pop-up.

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 594: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 594/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 594

Once all appropriate entries have been made, click on the Services button to

maintain the service specifications.

Page 595: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 595/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 595

If Hierarchy needs to be maintained, Click on New Sub Group button. Here,

hierarchy up to 4 levels can be maintained. Create the levels as follows;

Page 596: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 596/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 596

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Outlinelevel

Key for the outline(hierarchy) level.

R Give a number as per whichhierarchy will be maintained.

Short text Short description of theservice (activity or work).

R Short description of respectiveHierarchy level

Long Text Long description of theservice (activity or work).

O Long description of respectiveHierarchy level

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

In Service Specification Outline, double click on the respective level at whichthe service information needs to be maintained. It will take you to

screen”Model Service Specifications Maintain” for that level. Under the

respective level enter the information in the fields as specified in the table

below:

Page 597: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 597/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 597

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

ServiceNo

Service Number from ServiceMaster Record

O Enter Service Number for codifiedservices.

Don‟t give service no. if theservice to be maintained here isuncodified.

Matchcode(F4) searchhelp is

available.

Short Text Description of Service C For codified services, will defaultfrom Service Master record forService Number entered.

If a particular service is a one-timeservice and no service master

record in maintained, then a freetext description should be entered

here.

Quantity Quantity of Service R Enter Quantity for service.

U Unit R Enter unit of measure.

This will default from the Servicemaster record if a Service Number

is entered.

Matchcode(F4) search

help isavailable.

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)

Once all the entries have been made, save the Model Service Specification

by clicking on the Save button

The system will display a message “Model Specification XXXXXXX saved”,

with XXXXXXXX = to the name or number entered on the initial creation

screen.

Page 598: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 598/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 598

4. MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change

Overview

Need to change current Model Service Specification.

Business Process Procedure Overview 

Fields within the Model Service Specification record can be added and maintained after the initialcreation process.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Model Service Specification Model Service Specification number

Output - Results  Comments Information changed as per

requirement about the Model ServiceSpecification

Model Service Specification changed

Page 599: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 599/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 599

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

 b)  Via Menus  h)  Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model

Service Specification>Change

Via Transaction Code  ML11

On screen “Display Model Service specification”, enter information in thefields as specified in the table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Model

Service

Specs.

 Number of a set of model

service specifications

R Model Service Specification

known or via matchcode

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 600: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 600/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 600

Enter

It will take to “Change Model Service Specification” screen. Information about Service category, Blocking

indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default

data for Purchasing Requisition and Check Data can be changed. Please note, Administrative data can not

be changed as it is maintained by system.

Page 601: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 601/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 601

Click “Services” button. It will take to “Model Service Specification display” screen. 

To see the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, In header, go to “Outline”.

Click “Outline On/ Off”

It will show “service specs outline”.

Outline On/Off

Page 602: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 602/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 602

Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective

hierarchy level and make changes accordingly.

Page 603: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 603/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 603

5. MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display

Overview

Need to view current Model Service Specification.

Business Process Procedure Overview 

A Model Service Specification record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailedinformation without having the authority to change it.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments Model Service Specification Model Service Specification number

Output - Results  Comments Information about the Model Service

Specification

Model Service Specification displayed

Page 604: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 604/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 604

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

c)  Via Menus  i)  Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model

Service Specification>Display

Via Transaction Code  ML12

On screen “Display Model Service specification”, enter information in the

fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Model

ServiceSpecs.

 Number of a set of model

service specifications

R Model Service Specification

known or via matchcode

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Enter

Page 605: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 605/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 605

It will take to “Display Model Service Specification” screen. Information about Service category, Blocking

indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default

data for Purchasing Requisition, Check Data and Administrative data will be displayed.

Page 606: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 606/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 606

Click “Services” button. It will take to “Model Service Specification display” screen. 

To display the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, in header, go to

“Outline”. Click “Outline On/ Off”

It will display “service specs outline”.

Page 607: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 607/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 607

Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective

hierarchy level.

Page 608: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 608/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 608

3. Vendor Master

1. MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally)

Overview

A new vendor needs to be created.

Business Process Description Overview 

All vendor data is stored in the vendor master record and controls how transaction data is posted to avendor.

Vendor master data is used not only by the accounting department but also by the materials

management department. When setting up the master records, there is the option to create the

accounting and materials management sections separately, each in its own application area, or together

by creating the vendor master “centrally”. 

A vendor master record includes data such as:

· vendor name, address, language, and phone numbers

· tax numbers

· bank data

· account control data, such as the G/L reconciliation account for the vendor account

· payment methods and terms of payment as agreed with the vendor

· purchasing data

Page 609: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 609/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 609

Input –  Required Fields  Comments Vendor Name of vendor

Company Code Company code in which the vendor is being set up

Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization that the vendor is associated withAccount Group Account Group of vendorReference Vendor An existing vendor that the new vendor can be copied from

Output - Results  Comments All vendor information for NewVendor

Tips and Tricks 

This process describes creating the vendor master centrally (accounting views and the purchasingviews of the vendor master record). To create just the purchasing views, see the BPP for transactionMK01.

By creating/storing vendor master records centrally, permits common access and allows the enteringof data only once and to avoid contradictory/redundant data. If a vendor's address has changed, forexample, the user needs to enter the change only once, and both the accounting department and the

 purchasing department will have access to the most current data.

Page 610: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 610/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 610

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >Vendor> Central > Create 

Via Transaction Code  XK01

On screen “Create Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

Vendor If using external number assignment,

enter the vendor's account number.

If using internal number assignment,

the system assigns a number whensaving the master data.

O

Companycode

the company code ID R

Page 611: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 611/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 611

 Account

group

A classifying feature within the

vendor master record whichdetermines if the vendor account

number will be assigned internally or

externally and which fields are

proposed for input

R Enter account classifyingnumber

Reference

Vendor The vendor’s account number that is

being used as a reference as an

alternative way in which to create a

vendor account

O Note: Vendor specific dataof the referenced vendor

such as address is not

carried over. The datafrom the referenced

vendor is used for defaultvalues and it is suggested

that all screens bereviewed before savingany data

CompanyCode

The company code assigned with the

reference vendor

O

PurchasingOrganization

The purchasing associated with the

referenced vendor

C Please refer the attachedannexure

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 612: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 612/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 612

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Address Screen”, enter information in the fields

as specified in the table below:

FieldName

Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Name Vendor or company name R Enter selected vendor name

Searchterm

Short name which is usedto set up a matchcode

R Enter search term such asabbreviated address orinitials

Page 613: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 613/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 613

Street street address O

City city O

Postalcode orPO boxPCode

zip code O

Country two digit country identifier R

Region(state)

two letter stateabbreviation

O

Language one letter language code O

Telephone Telephone number O Other communication typescan also be maintained

Fax Fax number O

Standardcomm line

Other line forcommunication

O

Comments

Use this block for optionalcomments or notes

O

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 614: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 614/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 614

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Control”, enter information in the optional fields

as applicable in the table below:

FieldName

Description R/O/C

User Action andValues

Comments

Customer If the vendor is also a customer, usethis field to link the two recordstogether for line item display andtransaction processing

O

Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, can

assign a group key here. If creating amatchcode using this group key, groupevaluations are possible.

O

Industrykey

 Assigned industry key used to identifyindustry data

O Enter as required

Page 615: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 615/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 615

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions”, enter the vendor’s

banking information if applicable (e.g. for wire transfers):

FieldName

Description R/O/C

User Action andValues

Comments

Country Bank country key O

Bank Key Key under which bank data in therespective country is stored

O

 AccountHolder

 Another name that the paymentprogram can use if the name of theaccount holder is not the same as thename of the vendor

O

Page 616: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 616/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 616

Bank

 Account

The number at the bank under which

the account is managed

O

 AlternativePayee

The vendor’s account number   O This field is used onlyif the payment is tobe made directly tothe vendor and not tothe vendor’s bank 

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting”, enter

information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Field Name Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

Reconciliationaccount

account which is updated parallel tothe sub-ledger account for normalpostings

R

Sort key This field determines how theallocation field is populated duringdocument entry. When displayingline items, the line items are sortedinitially by the allocation field.

O

Page 617: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 617/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 617

Minority

Indicator

Minority Indicator O

InterestIndicator

Interest Indicator O

InterestFrequency

Interest Frequency O

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting”, enter

information in the optional fields as applicable:

Page 618: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 618/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 618

Field Name

Description R/O/C

User Action and Values Comments

PaymentTerms

Key for defining payment termscomposed of cash discountpercentages and payment periods

O

Tolerance group

Settings for vendor-specificparameters in Logistics InvoiceVerification.

O

CheckDoubleInvoice

Indicator which means that incominginvoices and credit memos arechecked for double entries at the timeof entry.

O

PaymentMethods

different methods by which the vendorcan be paid using the automaticpayment program

O

PaymentBlock

Block key used to block an open itemor an account for  paymenttransactions. 

O

 AlternatePayee

The account number of the vendorwith whom automatic paymenttransactions are to be carried out.

O

House

Bank

The key for the house bank is used if

the customer/vendor is always to bepaid by the same house bank. Thebank selection of the paymentprogram is cancelled with this entry.

O

PaymentMethodSuppliment

Characteristic in an open item for thegrouping of payments.

O

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:” enter information

in the fields as specified in the table below.

Leave this screen blank

Page 619: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 619/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 619

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:, enter information

in the fields as specified in the table below.

With-holding tax box not checked

Field

 Name

Description R/O/

C

User Action and Values Comments

Withholdi

ng Tax

Country

In some countries, an additional country

is needed for calculating or reporting

withholding tax. The calculation candepend on the payee's country

O

Indicatorforwithholdin

g tax type

This indicator is used to classify thedifferent types of withholding tax.

O

Withholdi

ng taxcode

One or more "withholding tax codes" are

assigned to each withholding tax type.

O

Liable towithholding tax

If you set this indicator, you tell thesystem that the vendor is subject towithholding tax for this withholding tax

type.

O

Type ofrecipient

It is used to group vendors togetheraccording to particular characteristicssuch as occupations that may be subject to

the same withholding tax type

O

Withholdin

identificatio

number

It is used to group vendors together

according to particular characteristicssuch as occupations that may be subject tothe same withholding tax type

O

Exemption

certificate n

 Numbered assigned by the relevant

authorities for exemption fromwithholding tax.

O

Exemption r Rate of exemption from withholding tax. O

Page 620: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 620/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 620

Reason forexemption

Indicator used to classify different typesof exemption from liability to a particular

withholding tax.

O

Date onwhich

exemption begins

Date from which withholding tax

exemption applies.

O

Date onwhich

exemptionends

Date up to which withholding tax

exemption applies.

O

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen Create Vendor: Purchasing Data, Enter information in the fields as

specified in the below table:

Page 621: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 621/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 621

FieldName

Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

OrderCurrency

Order Currency R Enter Currency Code fortransactions with this vendor

Incoterms Incoterms O Select code and enter valuein second box (FOB - city)

Schema

group,vendor

Schema group, vendor O Enter Schema code

GR-basedinv. Verif

Goods receipt basedinvoice

Verification flag

O Click on if applicable

Page 622: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 622/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 622

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Create Vendor: Partner Functions”, enter information in the

fields as specified in the below table:

Leave this screen blank

Page 623: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 623/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 623

When all information has been entered, the system will prompt the user to

save the information. Select the ‘Yes’ option. Click on the Enter  button.

The system will create and post vendor number in the message box at

bottom of screen.

Page 624: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 624/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 624

Page 625: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 625/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 625

2. MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally)

Overview

Requirement to change vendor material master document

Business Process Description Overview

Vendor master data is the data required conducting business relationships with your vendors. It includesaddress data and terms of payment, for example. It also controls how business transactions are posted to

a vendor account and how the posted data is processed.

Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments

Vendor

Company code

Processing Options Select at least one screen from among the general data (address,

control, payment transactions) or company code screens(accounting info., payment transactions, correspondence,withholding tax)

Output - Results Comments

Tips and Tricks

Use the mouse right click on any field and it a drop down display will appear with one of the

selections to take advantage of is possible entries. By using this function you can get information

on the types of data requirement for each field.

Page 626: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 626/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 626

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >

Vendor > Central > Change

Via Transaction Code  XK02

On screen “Change Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the table below

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor enter the vendor‟s account

number

R

Companycode

the company code ID of thevendor

R

Purch.

Organization

Purchase Organization R

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 627: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 627/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 627

Select the appropriate combination of general data or company code data or

purchasing organization data processing options for screens to change.

NOTE: The menu path Edit Select all  selects all the field groups listed

under General Data, Company Code Data and Purchasing Organization Data.

Click on the Enter  button.

Use the left (F7) or right (F8) arrow buttons at the top left of the screen to

navigate between the different general and company code data screens.

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Address” screen. Click

on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Page 628: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 628/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 628

Page 629: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 629/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 629

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Control Data” screen”.

Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Page 630: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 630/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 630

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Payment Transactions”

screen. Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Accounting Info.”

screen”. Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Page 631: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 631/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 631

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Payment Transactions”

screen”. Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Page 632: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 632/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 632

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Withholding Tax

screen”. Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Purchasing Data”

screen”. Click on the Enter  button to go to the next screen.

Page 633: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 633/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 633

To save the changes that were made to the master record, use menu path

Vendor Save.

Page 634: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 634/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 634

3. MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally)

Overview

To view the information related to vendor. You can display vendor using vendor number or using

drop down box select from vendor list.

Business Process Procedure OverviewThe display vendor (centrally) transaction allows the user to view the entire vendor master record. This

view includes general, company code, and purchasing data.

Input –  Required Fields Field Value/Comments

Vendor Vendor numberCompany Code The smallest organizational unit for which a complete self-

contained set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of

external reportingPurchasing Organization Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of

 purchase for one or more plants

Output –  Results Comments

Vendor displays A vendor‟s general data, company code data, and purchasing data

are accessible

Page 635: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 635/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 635

Tips and Tricks

On the Display vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box

that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search,

back up or go forward or exit the screen.

After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to

advance to the next screen(s)

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>Central> Display

Via Transaction Code  XK03

On screen “Display Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the table below:

Page 636: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 636/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 636

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or viamatchcode search

Companycode

The smallest organizationalunit for which a completeself-contained set ofaccounts can be drawn upfor purposes of external

reporting

O Company code known or viamatchcode searchsearch

Purchasing

organization

Organizational unit that

negotiates the generalconditions of purchase forone or more plants

O Purchasing organization known or

via matchcode search

Address Vendor address screen O Select if applicable

Control Control data screen O Select if applicable

Paymenttransactions

Banking information O Select if applicable

Accountinginfo

Accounting information O Select if applicable

Paymenttransactions

Payment information O Select if applicable

Page 637: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 637/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 637

Correspondence

Dunning and vendorcontact information

O Select if applicable

Withholdingtax

C Will see tax withholding in messaon bottom of screen” 

Purchasing

data

Purchasing information O Select if applicable

Partner

functions

Vendor partner structure O Select if applicable

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button. The following views are available to gather

information from.

Display Vendor: Address

Page 638: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 638/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 638

Display Vendor: Control

Display Vendor: Payment Transactions

Page 639: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 639/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 639

Display Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting

Display Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting

Display Vendor: Correspondence Accounting

 Not activated

Page 640: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 640/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 640

Display Vendor: Withholding Tax data

 Not activated

Display Vendor: Purchasing Data

Display Vendor: Partner Functions

Page 641: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 641/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 641

Page 642: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 642/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 642

4. MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally)

Overview

Requirement to view changes made to a vendor master record

Business Process Procedure Overview

All changes made to fields in the vendor master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displaysthe old field entry; the new field entry, as well as the table and field name. It also shows who made thechange and the date the change was made. Other information available includes deletions made to the

master record.

Input –  Required Fields Field Value/Comments

Vendor Vendor number

Output - Results CommentsVendor account changes display All changes made to the original vendor master record

Tips and Tricks

If you select a field and with a right click on the mouse button you will see a drop down box appear

and one of the selections you can see choose suggest entries for each field on a document.

Page 643: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 643/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 643

After each section click on the Enter button to advance to the next screen.

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>Central> Changes

Via Transaction Code  XK04

On screen “Vendor Account Changes: Initial Screen”, enter information in

the fields as specified in the table below:

Page 644: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 644/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 644

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment

s

Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or via

matchcodesearch

Companycode

The smallest organizationalunit for which a completeself-contained set of accounts

can be drawn up for purposesof external reporting

O Company code known or via dropdown menu

Page 645: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 645/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 645

Dunningarea

Represents an organizationalentity that is responsible for

dunning. The dunning areasrepresent a sub-structure of

the company codes

O Dunning area known or via dropdown menu

Purch.organization

Organizational unit thatnegotiates the generalconditions of purchase for

one or more plants

O Purchasing organization known orvia drop down menu

Vendor

sub-range

Sub-division of a vendor‟s

total product range accordingto various criteria

O Vendor sub-range known or via

drop down menu

Plant An organizational unit whereeither materials are producedand/or stored or goods or

services are provided

O Plant known or via drop downmenu

Period ofchange

  From change date

  Time

  Changed by

O Enter dateEnter TimeEnter User

FieldSelection

  Sensitive fields. Only

  Comp. Code-specific

fields only

O Display only sensitive fields.Display only company code

specific fields.

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Enter  button.

On screen “Vendor Changes: Changed Fields”, view the field changes made

to the vendor master record:

Overview: Overview  displays changed fields in the vendor master record.

If the user enters the purchasing organization and/or the company code on

Page 646: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 646/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 646

the initial screen, all purchasing and company code changes are visible. If

not, only the general data changes can be viewed.

Click on the All Changes button to view additional change information.

On screen “Vendor Changes: Overview”, view the detailed field change

information:

All Changes: The All Changed  view displays the changed field, when it was

changed, as well as the ‘old’ and ‘new’ value for the field. 

Page 647: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 647/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 647

Click on the Entries button to view additional change information.

On screen “Vendor Changes: Entries”, view the detailed entry change

information:

Entries: The Entries view displays the general views of the vendor

master. By double clicking on a view, the date and user who made the

change is visible.

Cli ck on the Deletions button to view additi onal change information.

On screen “Vendor Changes: Deletions”, view the detailed entry changeinformation:

Deletions: The Deletions view displays all deleted information from a

vendor master record such as bank details or partner function.

Not Available in this case

Page 648: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 648/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 648

Click on the Field Names button to view additional change information.

On screen “Vendor Changes: Changed Fields”, view the detailed entry

change information:

Field Names: The Field Names view displays the table, field name, and

field description for a particular piece of changed data.

Page 649: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 649/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 649

5. MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally)

Overview

To block a vendor from posting and order processing.

Business Process Procedure Overview 

You can block a vendor from posting, from order processing or from both. Blocking (and unblocking)can be set in either Financial Accounting or Materials Management. Within Accounts Payable, you can

 block a vendor account from posting. (See BPP Block Vendor (Accounting)). You have to block a

vendor master record before you can mark it for deletion. You would also block a vendor that you useonly as an alternative payment recipient, so that nobody can post to it by mistake. Only block an account

if there are no more open items in the account. If an account is blocked, you cannot clear any open items.

Within Purchasing, you can block a vendor from order processing. (See BPP Block Vendor(Purchasing)).

You can block a vendor from both posting and order processing simultaneously from either AccountsPayable or Purchasing (See BPP Block Vendor (Centrally)).

You can cancel a vendor account block at any time. To do this, simply remove the relevant

indicator.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments VendorCompany CodePurchasing Organization

Output - Results  Comments Vendor is blocked from posting or

order processing.

Page 650: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 650/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 650

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable 

Master Records Maintain Centrally  Block/Unblock

Logistics Materials Management  Master Data  Vendor

 Central  Block/Unblock

Via Transaction Code  XK05

On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the

fields as specified in the table below:

Page 651: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 651/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 651

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor Vendor number R Enter the Vendor number to be blocked.

Use dropdown menu

Company

Code

Company Code O If you enter a value in this field,

the next screen will allow you to block entries for this companycode or all company codes.However, if you leave this field

 blank, you will only be able block

ALL company codes.

Use drop

down menu

Purchasing

Organization

Purchasing Organization

identifier

O Please refer the attached annexure. Use drop

down menu

(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the to continue.

On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen”, enter information in

the fields as specified in the table below:

Page 652: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 652/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 652

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

AllCompanycodes

Indicator specifying whether posting is allowed for thisvendor master record for all

company codes.

O Check the box if the vendormasters record is to be blockedfrom posting for all company

codes.

SelectedCo. Code Indicates the vendor is blocked for posting in thespecified company code.

O Check the box if the vendormaster record is to be blockedfrom posting for only specified

company code.

All

PurchasingOrganizatio

n

Indicator specifying whether

 purchasing order processingis blocked for this vendor

master record for all purchasing organizations.

O Check the box if the vendor

master record is to be blockedfrom order processing for all

 purchasing organizations.

Block for

quality

reasons

Reasons for blocking this

vendor master record from

 purchasing order processing.

O Use the drop down menu for

 predefined reasons.

(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Page 653: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 653/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 653

Click on the “Save” Icon to save all the changes 

NOTE: A vendor account block may be cancelled at any time. To do this, simply remove the

relevant indicator/checks then click “Save” to save the changes 

Page 654: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 654/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 654

6. MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion

Overview

Archiving and Deleting Vendor Master Records

Business Process Procedure Overview 

You can archive vendor account master records that you no longer need. Archiving data entails it being

extracted from the SAP database, deleted and placed in a file. You can then transfer this file to an archivesystem.

Vendor master records may not be archived immediately. For you to archive a vendor master

record, the following requirements must be met:

The account cannot contain any transaction figures in the system. Transaction figures from prior

years that have not been archived will prevent the system from deleting the account master

record.

The account must be marked for deletion in its master record.

You should block an account for posting before you mark it for deletion. The only effect this deletionindicator has is to cause a warning to be issued every time you subsequently try to post to this account.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments VendorCompany CodePurchasing Organization

Output - Results  Comments Vendor is flagged for deletion

Page 655: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 655/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 655

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable 

Master Records Maintain Centrally  Mark for deletion

Logistics Materials Management  Master Data  Vendor

 Central  Mark for deletion

Via Transaction Code  XK06

On screen “Flag for deletion Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the

fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment

s

Vendor Vendor number R Enter the Vendor number to be

flagged for deletion.

Use drop

down menuCompany

Code

Company Code O If you enter a value in this field,

the next screen will allow you totick deletion flag and deletion

 block for this company code or allcompany codes. However, if you

Use drop

down menu

Page 656: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 656/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 656

leave this field blank, you willonly be able to tick deletion flag

and deletion block for ALLcompany codes.

PurchasingOrganization

Purchasing Organization O Please refer the attached annexure Use dropdown menu

(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the to continue.

On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen”, enter information in

the fields as specified in the table below:

Page 657: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 657/701

  MM COURSE: MASTER  

Page | 657

Page 658: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 658/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 658

FieldName

Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Deletion

Flag

All areas Indicates that all data in this

master record is to be deleted.

O Check the box if the vendor

master record is to be flagged fordeletion for all company codes.

Selected

Co. Code

Indicates that the company

code data in this masterrecord is to be deleted.

O Check the box if the vendor

master record is to be flagged fordeletion for only specifiedcompany code.

All

PurchasingOrganization

Indicates whether or not

the vendor master record

is earmarked for deletion.

O Check the box if the vendor

master record is to be flagged fordeletion for all purchasingorganizations.

Deletion

Block

GeneralData

This indicator specifies thatthe general data in the master

record may not be deleted.

O Check the box if general data invendor master record is not to be

deleted.

Selectedco. code

includinggeneraldata

This indicator specifies thatthe company code-specific

data in the master record maynot be deleted.

O Check the box if company code-specific data in the master record

is not to be deleted.

(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the “Save” Icon to save all the changes. 

Page 659: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 659/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 659

7. MM-MKVZ-List Display

Overview

Requirement to view information of a vendor maintained for purchasing. You can display vendor using

vendor number or using drop down box select from vendor list.

Business Process Procedure Overview

The Purchasing List transaction allows the user to view the vendor master record maintained for purchasing. This view includes purchasing data.

Input –  Required Fields Field Value/Comments

Vendor Vendor number

Purchasing Organization

Account Group

Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of

 purchase for one or more plants

The account group is a classifying feature within vendor masterrecords

Output - Results Comments

Vendor displays A vendor‟s purchasing data are accessible 

Page 660: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 660/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 660

Tips and Tricks

  On the List of vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box

that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search, back

up or go forward or exit the screen.

  After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to

advance to the next screen(s)

Page 661: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 661/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 661

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>List Displays>

Via Transaction Code  MKVZ

On screen “Display Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

specified in the table below:

Page 662: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 662/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 662

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment

s

Vendor Vendor number O Vendor number known or viamatchcode search

Purchasingorganization

Organizational unit thatnegotiates the generalconditions of purchase for

one or more plants

O Please refer the attached annexure

AccountGroup

The account group is aclassifying feature within

vendor master records

O Select if applicable

(Note:  On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional) 

Click on the Execute button.

Page 663: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 663/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 663

8. MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance

Overview

Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as

different class vendors have different tender limits.

Prerequisite:

1.  Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level

2.  Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01 

Business Process:

1.  Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level

2.  Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01 

Activity T Code Remarks

Maintain Class & Value Limit relationship

that be utilized for further classification forvendors

ZMMP_VCL01 Maintain the Class & Value

Relationship, Enter Class, ClassDescription, Value Limit &

Currency

Click on to maintain

more values & class relationship

Procedural Steps:

1.  In the screen “Change View “Vendor Classification” :Overview” enter values in the following fields:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendorclass

 Name a new vendor class C Enter the serial number.

Text 30characters

Give short name to the class. C Write short description.

Value limitfor vendors

Amount defined for that vendorclass

C Enter amount applicable forthat class.

Referencefor

currency

Enter unit C Enter unit.

Page 664: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 664/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 664

After entering the selection parameter Press Save button .

1.1. “Change View “Vendor Classification” :Overview” Screen: 

Fill in the required fields and click “Save button “   

Page 665: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 665/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 665

9. MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance

Overview

Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as

different class vendors have different tender limits.

Prerequisite:

3.  Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level

4.  Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VC01. 

Business Process:

1.  Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor

masters related to Civil as different class vendors have different tender limits

Activity T Code Remarks

Classifying the vendor & assigning therelevant class applicable for the vendor

ZMMP_VC01 Enter Company code & Plant todisplay existing entriesClick on Change button to change

the class

Click on to maintain

Enter vendor code, company code, plant & chose relevant class

applicable for vendor

Page 666: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 666/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 666

Procedural Steps

Field NameDescription R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Accountnumber ofvendor

Takes the vendor number. C Enter the vendor number

Company

code

Takes the company code. C Write the company code for

the vendor.

1.1. “Vendor Classification Maintenance” screen: 

Enter company code and plant in the required fields.

Press Execute button .

1.2. Screen shows a list of vendors belonging to that plant.

Make any changes if necessary in the vendor class else press “New Entries “tab to add

more vendors.

Page 667: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 667/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 667

1.3. New entries: Overview of Added Entries:

Fill the required fields and click Enter. Data will be saved.

Page 668: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 668/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 668

Page 669: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 669/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 669

4. Price Info Record

1. MM-ME11-Info Record-Create

Overview

Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option ofstoring information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization

Vendor NumberMaterial NumberPurchasing Organization Number

Plant Plant Number

Output - Results  Comments 

Info Record Creates System Generates a Info record number

Page 670: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 670/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 670

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Masterdata>Info Record>Create

Via Transaction Code  ME11

Page 671: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 671/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 671

Create Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor Vendor Number R Type the vendor code or callF4 to select the vendor

Material Material Number R Type the material code or call

F4 to select material

Purchasing

Org.

Purchasing Organization R Type the respective Purchasing

org or call F4 to select the purchasing org

Plant Plant number R Type the respective plant codeor call F4 to select your plant

InfoCategory

Specifies the type of inforecord

R Select the appropriate categorye.g. standard

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Vendor

Materi

 

Purchasin

Plant

Info

Page 672: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 672/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 672

On the screen, Create Info Record: General Data Screen

In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Materialgroup.

There are some other fields also available with optional entries in this General Data screen.

Page 673: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 673/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 673

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

1st,2nd,3rd 

Rem./Exped.

 No of days for

reminder/Expediter

O Mention no of days as

reminder

Vendormaterial no

Material number used by thevendor

O Type the vendor material codeif any

Telephone Vendor‟s Telephone number   O Type the vendor telephonenumber

Order Unit Specifies the unit of measurein which the material isordered

R Base unit of measure or theorder unit is defaulted frommaterial master

Conversion Denominator for conversion

of order unit to base unit

R Enter the number of units of

the alternative unit of measure(denominator) that corresponds

to the number of units of the base unit of measure(numerator).

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 674: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 674/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 674

1.4  On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page 675: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 675/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 675

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Pl. Deliv.

Time

Planned Delivery time in

Days

R Type the number of days

needed to obtain the material

StandardQty

Standard Purchase orderquantity

R Type the quantity of thematerial that is normallyordered from this vendor

specified in this info record

 Net Price Net price in purchasing info

record

R The price is automatically

determined by the system, butyou can also overwrite this

 price

PurchasingGroup

Key for a buyer or group of buyers responsible for purchasing activities

R Type the respective purchasinggroup or call F4 to selectappropriate pur group

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 676: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 676/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 676

1.5. On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Quotation  Number of vendor‟squotation. The specification is

for information only

O Type the vendor quotation

Quotation

from

Date of vendor‟s quotation.

The specification is forinformation only

O Type the vendor quotation date

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 677: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 677/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 677

1.6 On screen Create Info record : Text overview

Page 678: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 678/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 678

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Info Recordnote

A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.

O Type the necessary descriptionto describe in greater details

Purchaseorder Text

A text that describes theobject to which it refers in

greater detail.

O Type the necessary descriptionto describe in greater details

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Now select the icon at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.

System will generate a new info record number

at the bottom of the screen.

Page 679: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 679/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 679

2. MM-ME12-Info Record-Change

Overview

Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview 

Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option ofstoring information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.

Under this change transaction we can change the maintained data of an existing purchasing Info record.

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization

Vendor Number

Material NumberPurchasing Organization Number

PlantInfo Record

Plant Number Number of Purchasing Info Record

Output - Results  Comments 

Info Record Creates System will change the Info record

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Masterdata>Info Record>Change

Via Transaction Code  ME12

Page 680: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 680/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 680

Page 681: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 681/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 681

Change Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below

Vendor

Materi

 

Purchasin

Plant

Info

Info

Page 682: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 682/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 682

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor Vendor Number R Type the vendor code or call

F4 to select the vendorMaterial Material Number R Type the material code or call

F4 to select material

Purchasing

Org.

Purchasing Organization R Type the respective Purchasing

org or call F4 to select the purchasing org

Plant Plant number R Type the respective plant codeor call F4 to select your plant

Info Record Number of purchasing Inforecord

R Specify the Purchasing inforecord number in which you

would like to make changes

Info

Category

Specifies the type of info

record

R Select the appropriate category

e.g. standard

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 683: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 683/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 683

On the screen, Change Info Record: General Data Screen

Page 684: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 684/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 684

In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Materialgroup as encircled and highlighted with red color in the above screen shot.

You can make the changes of the following mentioned fields in the General data Screen. 

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

1st,2nd,3rd Rem./Expe

d.

 No of days forreminder/Expediter

O You can change the no of daysas reminder

Vendor

material no

Material number used by the

vendor

O Change the vendor material

code if any

Telephone Vendor‟s Telephone number   O Change the vendor telephone

number

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 685: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 685/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 685

1.5  On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page 686: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 686/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 686

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Pl. Deliv.Time

Planned Delivery time inDays

O Change the number of daysneeded to obtain the material ifrequired

StandardQty

Standard Purchase orderquantity

O Change the quantity of thematerial that is normally

ordered from this vendorspecified in this info record if

required

PurchasingGroup

Key for a buyer or group of buyers responsible for purchasing activities

O Change the respective purchasing group or call F4 toselect appropriate pur group

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 687: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 687/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 687

1.5. On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Quotation  Number of vendor‟squotation. The specification is

for information only

O Change the vendor quotation

Quotation

from

Date of vendor‟s quotation.

The specification is forinformation only

O Change the vendor quotation

date

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 688: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 688/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 688

1.6 On screen Change Info record : Text overview

Page 689: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 689/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 689

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Info Recordnote

A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.

O Change or type the necessarydescription to describe ingreater details

Purchaseorder Text

A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.

O Change or type the necessarydescription to describe ingreater details

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Now select the icon at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.

System will generate a message with stating

that purchasing info record changed.

Page 690: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 690/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 690

3. MM-ME13-Info Record-Display

Overview

Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview 

Display allows one material number to be used for displaying Info Record which is already created.

Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Info Record.

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization

Vendor NumberMaterial Number

Purchasing Organization Number

PlantInfo Record

Plant NumberInfo Record Number

Output - Results  Comments 

Info Record Displays

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master

data>Info Record>Display

Via Transaction Code  ME13

Page 691: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 691/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 691

Display Info Record List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Vendor Vendor Number R Number known or via match-code

Material Material Number R Number known or via match-code

PurchasingOrg.

Purchasing Organization R Number known or via match-code

Plant Plant number R Number known or via match-code

Info Record Info Record Number R Number known or via match-code

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 692: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 692/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 692

On screen, Display Info Record: General Data Screen:

The following fields will be displayed:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Info Record Info Record Number R Displays

Vendor Vendor Number C

Material Material Master R Defaults from Initial Screen

Page 693: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 693/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 693

1.6  On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page 694: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 694/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 694

1.5. On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Page 695: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 695/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 695

5. Source List

1. MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain

Overview

To maintain list of vendors on material group level which will be used as an information about probable

source for procuring material pertaining to that material group.

Business Process Description Overview 

A source list specifies all the sources of supply of a specific material.

This source list will be used just as a reference to have list of all the vendors who supply materials

 pertaining to that material group.

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Material Master number (Same as Material group no.)

Plant Receiving Plant

Valid from Date the vendor starts being a valid source

Valid to Dates vendor stops being a valid source

Vendor Suppliers which supply materials belonging to the material groupto which this dummy material relates.

Pur. Org Purchasing Organization

Output - Results  Comments Source List Source of supply for specific material within Plant

Page 696: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 696/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 696

Tips and Tricks

  A source list is specific to each plant. A separate list needs to be maintained for each plant for each

material. (Note: the plant is a mandatory field when creating a source list).

Business Process Procedure Detail

Access Maintain Source Lists manually by:

Via Menus  (a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Source List>Maintain

(b)  Logistics>Sales and Distribution>ForeignTrade/Customs>General Foreign TradeProcessing>Environment>Purchase  –  

Import>Purchasing>Master Data>Source List>Maintain(c)  Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing

>Master Data>Source List>Maintain

Via Transaction Code  ME01

On Maintain Source List: Initial Screen:

Field Name Description R/O

/C

User Action and

Values

Comments

Material Material Master Number

R Material masternumber known orvia match-code

Plant Receiving Plant R Enter receiving plantnumber

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional) 

Page 697: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 697/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 697

Enter .

On Maintain Source List: Overview Screen:

Field Name Description R/O/C * User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Master Number R Defaults from Initial Screen

Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen

Valid From Date vendor starts being avalid source

R Enter the date

Valid to Dates vendor stops being a

valid source

R Enter date

Vendor Vendor name / number R Enter the known vendornumber or search via match-

code

Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Please refer the attachedannexure

(* R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional)

Enter & Save. 

Page 698: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 698/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 698

2. MM-ME03-Source List-Display

Overview

Supply source information maintained on material group level is required.

Business Process Description Overview 

Display allows one material number to be used for displaying source list which is already created.Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Source Lists

Input - Required Fields  Field Value / Comments 

Material Material Number

Plant Plant Number

Output - Results  Comments 

Source List Displays

Procedural Steps 

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master

data>Source List>Display

Via Transaction Code  ME03

Page 699: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 699/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 699

Display Source List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Material Number R Number known or via match-

code

Plant Plant number R Number known or via match-

code

(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page 700: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 700/701

  MM COURSE 1 

Page | 700

On screen, Display Source List: Overview Screen: enter information in table below:

The following fields will be displayed:

Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments

Material Material Master R Defaults from Initial Screen

Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen

Valid From Date vendor starts being avalid source

R Displays the date

Valid to Dates vendor stops being avalid source

R Displays date

Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Displays PurchasingOrganization code

Vendor Vendor Master R Displays Vendor

Page 701: 1 MM-Master

7/24/2019 1 MM-Master

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 701/701

  MM COURSE 1 

3. MM-ME0M-Source List for Material

Overview

Creating possible sources of supply for a material

Business Process Procedure Overview 

Source lists records are used in determining the effective source of a material. Source determination is the process of assigning a particular source of supply to a purchase requisition or vice versa. A source list

specifies the possible sources of supply for a material over a given period of time. It shows the time period in which a material may be ordered from a given vendor or under a certain long term purchaseagreement. The system can generate a source list for a material automatically. A source list is created.

Input –  Required Fields  Field Value/Comments MaterialPlant

Output - Results Source List

Procedural Steps 

Access transaction by:

Via Menus  a)  Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master

Data> Source List > List Displays> By Material

Via Transaction Code  ME0M